]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
re PR tree-optimization/79256 (FAIL: gcc.dg/vect/pr25413a.c execution test)
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2017 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac POST_LINK_SPEC
379 Define this macro to add additional steps to be executed after linker.
380 The default value of this macro is empty string.
381 @end defmac
382
383 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
384 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
385 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
386 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
387 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
388 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
389 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
390 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
391 @end defmac
392
393 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
394
395 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
396 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
397 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
398 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
399 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
400
401 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
402 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
403 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
404 @xref{Target Fragment}.
405 @end defmac
406
407 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
408 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
409 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
410 indicates an absolute file name.
411 @end defmac
412
413 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
414 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
415 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
416 when the compiler is built as a cross
417 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
418 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.ac}.
419 @end defmac
420
421 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
422 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
423 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
424 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
425 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
426 is built as a cross compiler.
427 @end defmac
428
429 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
430 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
431 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
432 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
433 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
434 is built as a cross compiler.
435 @end defmac
436
437 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
438 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
439 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
440 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
441 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
442 is built as a cross compiler.
443 @end defmac
444
445 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
446 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
447 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
448 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
449 @end defmac
450
451 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
452 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
453 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
454 cross compiler.
455 @end defmac
456
457 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
458 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
459 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
460 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
461 initialize the necessary environment variables.
462 @end defmac
463
464 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
465 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
466 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
467 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
468 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
469 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
470
471 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
472 replacement.
473 @end defmac
474
475 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
476 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
477 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
478 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
479 @end defmac
480
481 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
482 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
483 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
484 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
485 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
486 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
487 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
488 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
489 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
490
491 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
492 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
493 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
494 for C++-only directories,
495 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
496 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
497 the array with a null element.
498
499 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
500 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
501 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
502 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
503
504 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
505
506 @smallexample
507 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
508 @{ \
509 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
510 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
511 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
512 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
513 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
514 @}
515 @end smallexample
516 @end defmac
517
518 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
519
520 @enumerate
521 @item
522 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
523
524 @item
525 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
526 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
527 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
528
529 @item
530 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
531
532 @item
533 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
534 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
535
536 @item
537 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
538
539 @item
540 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
541
542 @item
543 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
544 compiler.
545 @end enumerate
546
547 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
548
549 @enumerate
550 @item
551 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
552
553 @item
554 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
555 value based on the installed toolchain location.
556
557 @item
558 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
559 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
560
561 @item
562 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
563 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
564
565 @item
566 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
567
568 @item
569 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
570 compiler.
571
572 @item
573 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
574 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
575
576 @item
577 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
578 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
582 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
583 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/lib/}.
589
590 @item
591 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
592 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
593 @file{/usr/lib/}.
594 @end enumerate
595
596 @node Run-time Target
597 @section Run-time Target Specification
598 @cindex run-time target specification
599 @cindex predefined macros
600 @cindex target specifications
601
602 @c prevent bad page break with this line
603 Here are run-time target specifications.
604
605 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
606 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
607 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
608 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
609 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
610 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
611 finished command line option processing your code can use those
612 results freely.
613
614 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
615 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
616 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
617 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
618
619 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
620 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
621 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
622 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
623 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
624 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
625 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
626 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
627 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
628 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
629
630 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
631 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
632 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
633 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
634 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
635 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
636 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
637 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
638 preprocessing.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target operating system instead.
644 @end defmac
645
646 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
647 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
648 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
649 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
650 it yourself.
651 @end defmac
652
653 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
654 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
655 any target-specific headers.
656 @end deftypevar
657
658 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
659 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
660 Its default setting is 0.
661 @end deftypevr
662
663 @cindex optional hardware or system features
664 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
665
666 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
667 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
668 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
669 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
670 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
671 definition does nothing but return true.
672
673 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
674 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
675 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
676 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
677 via attributes).
678 @end deftypefn
679
680 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
681 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
682 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
683 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
684 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
685 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
686 default definition does nothing but return false.
687
688 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
689 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
690 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
691 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
692 @end deftypefn
693
694 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
695
696 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
697
698 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
699
700 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
701
702 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
703
704 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
705
706 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
707 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
708 but is only used in the C
709 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
710 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
711 frontends.
712 @end defmac
713
714 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
715 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
716 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
717 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
718 options are processed once
719 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
720 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
721 options passed explicitly.
722
723 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
724 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
725 @code{optimize} attribute.
726 @end deftypevr
727
728 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
729
730 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
731
732 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
733 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
734 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
735 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
736 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
737 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
738
739 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
740 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
741 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
742 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
743 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
744 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
745 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
746
747 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
748 is 0.
749 @end defmac
750
751 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
752
753 @node Per-Function Data
754 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
755 @cindex per-function data
756 @cindex data structures
757
758 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
759 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
760 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
761 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
762 when another one comes along.
763
764 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
765 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
766 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
767 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
768 to their own specific data.
769
770 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
771 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
772 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
773 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
774
775 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
776 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
777 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
778 function, for level 0.
779
780 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
781 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
782 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
783 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
784 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
785 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
786 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
787 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
788 longer supported.
789
790 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
791 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
792 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
793 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
794 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
795 @end defmac
796
797 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
798 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
799 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
800 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
801 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
802 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
803
804 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
805 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
806 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
807 @end deftypevar
808
809 @node Storage Layout
810 @section Storage Layout
811 @cindex storage layout
812
813 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
814 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
815 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
816 @xref{Run-time Target}.
817
818 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
819 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
820 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
821 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
822 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
823 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
824 macro need not be a constant.
825
826 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
827 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
832 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
833 @end defmac
834
835 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
836 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
837 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
838 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
839 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
840 macro need not be a constant.
841 @end defmac
842
843 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
844 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
845 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
846 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
847 the order of words in memory.
848 @end defmac
849
850 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
851 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
852 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
853 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
854 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
855
856 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
857 multi-word integers.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
861 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
862 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
863 @end defmac
864
865 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
866 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
867 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
868 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
873 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
874 @end defmac
875
876 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
877 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
878 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
879 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
880 @end defmac
881
882 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
883 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
884 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
885 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
886 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
887 @end defmac
888
889 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
890 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
891 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
892 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
893 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
894 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
895 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
896
897 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
898 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
899 @end defmac
900
901 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
902 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
903 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
904 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
905 scalar type.
906
907 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
908 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
909 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
910 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
911 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
912 counterparts.
913
914 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
915 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
916 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
917 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
918 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
919 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
920
921 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
922 @end defmac
923
924 @hook TARGET_C_EXCESS_PRECISION
925
926 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
927
928 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
929 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
930 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
931 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
932 size of an integer.
933 @end defmac
934
935 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
936 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
937 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
938 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
939 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
940 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
941 @end defmac
942
943 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
944 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
945 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
946 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
947 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
948 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
949 @end defmac
950
951 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
952 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
953 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
954 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
955 @end defmac
956
957 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
958 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
959 @end defmac
960
961 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
962 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
963 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
964 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
965 @end defmac
966
967 @hook TARGET_ABSOLUTE_BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
968
969 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
970 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
971 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
972 @end defmac
973
974 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
975 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
976 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
977 @end defmac
978
979 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
980 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
981 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
982 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
983 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
984 @end defmac
985
986 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
987 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
988 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
989 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
990 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
991 @end defmac
992
993 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{type}, @var{computed})
994 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} of
995 type @var{type} if the alignment computed in the usual way (including
996 applying of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
997 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
998 field alignment has not been set by the
999 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. Note that @var{field}
1000 may be @code{NULL_TREE} in case we just query for the minimum alignment
1001 of a field of type @var{type} in structure context.
1002 @end defmac
1003
1004 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
1005 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
1006 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
1007
1008 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1009
1010 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1011 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1012 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1013 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1014 @end defmac
1015
1016 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1017 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1018 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1019 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1020 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1021
1022 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1023 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1024 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1025 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1026 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1027 @end defmac
1028
1029 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1030 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1031 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1032 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1033 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1034
1035 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1036
1037 @findex strcpy
1038 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1039 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1040 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1041 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1042 @end defmac
1043
1044 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1045 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1046 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1047 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1048 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1049
1050 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1051 @end defmac
1052
1053 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1054 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1055 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1056 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1057 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1058 align the object.
1059
1060 The default definition just returns @var{basic-align}.
1061
1062 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1063 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1064 constants can be done inline.
1065 @end defmac
1066
1067 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1068 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1069 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1070 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1071 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1072
1073 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1074
1075 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1076 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1077
1078 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1079 @end defmac
1080
1081 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1082
1083 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1084 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1085 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1086 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1087 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1088 align the slot.
1089
1090 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1091 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1092 be used.
1093
1094 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1095 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1096
1097 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1098 @end defmac
1099
1100 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1101 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1102 variable @var{decl}.
1103
1104 If this macro is not defined, then
1105 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1106 is used.
1107
1108 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1109 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1110
1111 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1112 @end defmac
1113
1114 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1115 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1116 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1117 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1118
1119 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1120 @end defmac
1121
1122 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1123 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1124 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1125
1126 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1127 @end defmac
1128
1129 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1130 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1131 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1132
1133 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1134 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1135 @end defmac
1136
1137 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1138 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1139 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1140 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1141 @end defmac
1142
1143 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1144 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1145 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1146
1147 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1148 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1149 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1150 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1151 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1152
1153 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1154 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1155 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1156 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1157
1158 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1159 structure.
1160
1161 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1162 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1163
1164 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1165 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1166 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1167 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1168
1169 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1170 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1171 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1172
1173 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1174 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1175 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1176
1177 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1178 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1179 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1180
1181 @smallexample
1182 struct foo1
1183 @{
1184 char x;
1185 char :0;
1186 char y;
1187 @};
1188
1189 struct foo2
1190 @{
1191 char x;
1192 int :0;
1193 char y;
1194 @};
1195
1196 main ()
1197 @{
1198 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1199 sizeof (struct foo1));
1200 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1201 sizeof (struct foo2));
1202 exit (0);
1203 @}
1204 @end smallexample
1205
1206 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1207 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1208 @end defmac
1209
1210 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1211 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1212 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1213 @end defmac
1214
1215 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1216
1217 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1218
1219 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1220
1221 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1222 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1223 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1224 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1225 @var{specified}.
1226
1227 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1228 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1229 @end defmac
1230
1231 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1232 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1233 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1234 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1235 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1236 (DImode)} is assumed.
1237 @end defmac
1238
1239 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1240 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1241 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1242 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1243 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1244 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1245 having its mode specified.
1246
1247 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1248 would most commonly define this macro if the
1249 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1250 64-bit mode.
1251 @end defmac
1252
1253 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1254 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1255 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1256 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1257
1258 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1259 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1260 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1261 @end defmac
1262
1263 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1264
1265 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1266
1267 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1268
1269 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1270
1271 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1272
1273 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1274
1275 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1276
1277 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1278
1279 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1280
1281 @node Type Layout
1282 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1283
1284 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1285 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1286 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1287 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1288
1289 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1290 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1291 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1292 @end defmac
1293
1294 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1295 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1296 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1297 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1298 unit.)
1299 @end defmac
1300
1301 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1302 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1303 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1304 @end defmac
1305
1306 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1307 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1308 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1309 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1310 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1311 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1312 @end defmac
1313
1314 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1315 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1316 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1317 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1318 macro must be at least 64.
1319 @end defmac
1320
1321 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1322 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1323 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1324 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1325 @end defmac
1326
1327 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1328 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1329 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1330 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1331 @end defmac
1332
1333 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1334 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1335 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1336 @end defmac
1337
1338 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1339 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1340 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1341 words.
1342 @end defmac
1343
1344 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1345 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1346 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1347 words.
1348 @end defmac
1349
1350 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1351 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1352 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1353 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1354 @end defmac
1355
1356 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1357 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1358 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1359 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1360 @end defmac
1361
1362 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1363 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1364 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1365 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1366 @end defmac
1367
1368 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1369 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1370 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1371 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1372 @end defmac
1373
1374 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1375 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1376 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1377 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1378 @end defmac
1379
1380 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1381 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1382 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1383 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1384 @end defmac
1385
1386 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1387 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1388 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1389 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1390 @end defmac
1391
1392 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1393 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1394 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1395 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1396 @end defmac
1397
1398 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1399 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1400 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1401 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1402 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1403 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1404 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1405 @end defmac
1406
1407 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1408 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1409 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1410 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1411 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1412 is the default.
1413 @end defmac
1414
1415 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1416 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1417 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1418 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1419 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1420 @end defmac
1421
1422 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1423
1424 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1425 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1426 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1427 contents of the string.
1428
1429 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1430 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1431 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1432 of the data type names defined in the function
1433 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1434 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1435 compiler to crash on startup.
1436
1437 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1438 int"}.
1439 @end defmac
1440
1441 @defmac SIZETYPE
1442 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1443 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1444 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1445 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1446 is extracted.
1447
1448 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1449
1450 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1451 @end defmac
1452
1453 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1454 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1455 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1456 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1457 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1458
1459 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1460 @end defmac
1461
1462 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1463 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1464 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1465 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1466 information.
1467
1468 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1469 @end defmac
1470
1471 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1472 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1473 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1474 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1475 @end defmac
1476
1477 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1478 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1479 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1480 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1481 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1482 information.
1483
1484 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1485 @end defmac
1486
1487 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1488 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1489 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1490 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1491 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1492
1493 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1494 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1495 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1496 @end defmac
1497
1498 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1499 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1500 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1501 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1502 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1503
1504 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1505 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1506 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1507 int}.
1508 @end defmac
1509
1510 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1511 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1512 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1513 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1514 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1515 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1516 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1517 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1518 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1519 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1520 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1521 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1522 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1523 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1524 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1525 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1526 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1527 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1528 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1529 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1530 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1531 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1532 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1533 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1534 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1535 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1536 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1537 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1538 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1539 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1540 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1541 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1542 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1543 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1544 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1545 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1546 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1547
1548 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1549 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1550 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1551 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1552 these macros are null pointers.
1553 @end defmac
1554
1555 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1556 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1557 that looks like:
1558
1559 @smallexample
1560 struct @{
1561 union @{
1562 void (*fn)();
1563 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1564 @};
1565 ptrdiff_t delta;
1566 @};
1567 @end smallexample
1568
1569 @noindent
1570 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1571 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1572 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1573 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1574 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1575 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1576 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1577 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1578
1579 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1580 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1581 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1582 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1583 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1584 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1585 architecture, you should define this macro to
1586 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1587
1588 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1589 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1590 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1591 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1592 @end defmac
1593
1594 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1595 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1596 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1597 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1598 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1599 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1600 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1601
1602 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1603 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1604 @end defmac
1605
1606 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1607 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1608 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1609 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1610 when special alignment is necessary. */
1611 @end defmac
1612
1613 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1614 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1615 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1616 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1617 of words in each data entry.
1618 @end defmac
1619
1620 @node Registers
1621 @section Register Usage
1622 @cindex register usage
1623
1624 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1625 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1626
1627 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1628 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1629 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1630 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1631 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1632
1633 @menu
1634 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1635 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1636 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1637 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1638 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1639 @end menu
1640
1641 @node Register Basics
1642 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1643
1644 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1645 Registers have various characteristics.
1646
1647 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1648 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1649 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1650 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1651 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1652 @end defmac
1653
1654 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1655 @cindex fixed register
1656 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1657 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1658 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1659 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1660 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1661 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1662 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1663
1664 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1665 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1666 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1667
1668 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1669 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1670 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1671 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1672 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1673 @end defmac
1674
1675 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1676 @cindex call-used register
1677 @cindex call-clobbered register
1678 @cindex call-saved register
1679 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1680 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1681 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1682 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1683 function calls.
1684
1685 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1686 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1687 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1688 @end defmac
1689
1690 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1691 @cindex call-used register
1692 @cindex call-clobbered register
1693 @cindex call-saved register
1694 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1695 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1696 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1697 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1698 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1699 @end defmac
1700
1701 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1702 @cindex call-used register
1703 @cindex call-clobbered register
1704 @cindex call-saved register
1705 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1706 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1707 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1708 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1709 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1710 @end defmac
1711
1712 @findex fixed_regs
1713 @findex call_used_regs
1714 @findex global_regs
1715 @findex reg_names
1716 @findex reg_class_contents
1717 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1718
1719 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1720 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1721 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1722 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1723 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1724 outbound register.
1725 @end defmac
1726
1727 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1728 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1729 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1730 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1731 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1732 register.
1733 @end defmac
1734
1735 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1736 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1737 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1738 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1739 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1740 gotos.
1741 @end defmac
1742
1743 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1744 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1745 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1746 @end defmac
1747
1748 @node Allocation Order
1749 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1750 @cindex order of register allocation
1751 @cindex register allocation order
1752
1753 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1754 Registers are allocated in order.
1755
1756 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1757 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1758 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1759 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1760
1761 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1762 (all else being equal).
1763
1764 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1765 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1766 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1767 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1768 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1769 @end defmac
1770
1771 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1772 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1773 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1774
1775 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1776 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1777 register; and so on.
1778
1779 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1780 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1781
1782 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1783 @end defmac
1784
1785 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1786 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1787 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1788 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1789 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1790 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1791 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1792 @end defmac
1793
1794 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1795 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1796 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1797 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1798 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1799 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1800 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1801 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1802
1803 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1804 @end defmac
1805
1806 @node Values in Registers
1807 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1808
1809 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1810 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1811 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1812
1813 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1814 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1815 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1816 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1817 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1818 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1819
1820 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1821 definition of this macro is
1822
1823 @smallexample
1824 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1825 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1826 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1827 @end smallexample
1828 @end defmac
1829
1830 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1831 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1832 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1833 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1834 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1835 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1836 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1837
1838 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1839 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1840 nonzero.
1841
1842 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1843 @code{subreg_get_info}
1844 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1845 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1846 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1847 registers and so not be representable.
1848 @end defmac
1849
1850 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1851 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1852 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1853 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1854 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1855 @end defmac
1856
1857 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1858 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1859 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1860 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1861 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1862 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1863 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1864 @end defmac
1865
1866 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1867 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1868 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1869 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1870 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1871
1872 @smallexample
1873 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1874 @end smallexample
1875
1876 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1877 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1878
1879 @cindex register pairs
1880 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1881 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1882 odd register numbers for such modes.
1883
1884 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1885 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1886 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1887 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1888
1889 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1890 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1891 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1892 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1893 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1894 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1895 to be tieable.
1896
1897 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1898 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1899 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1900 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1901 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1902 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1903
1904 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1905 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1906 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1907 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1908 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1909 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1910 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1911 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1912 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1913
1914 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1915 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1916 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1917 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1918 constraints for those instructions.
1919
1920 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1921 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1922 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1923 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1924 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1925 @end defmac
1926
1927 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1928 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1929 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1930
1931 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1932 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1933 handler.
1934
1935 The default is always nonzero.
1936 @end defmac
1937
1938 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1939 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1940 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1941
1942 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1943 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1944 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1945 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1946 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1947 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1948
1949 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1950 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1951 allocation.
1952 @end defmac
1953
1954 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1955
1956 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1957 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1958 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1959 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1960 @end defmac
1961
1962 @node Leaf Functions
1963 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1964
1965 @cindex leaf functions
1966 @cindex functions, leaf
1967 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1968 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1969 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1970 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1971 normally arrive.
1972
1973 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1974 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1975 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1976 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1977 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1978 functions''.
1979
1980 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1981 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1982 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1983 accomplish this.
1984
1985 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1986 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1987 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1988 function treatment.
1989
1990 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1991 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1992 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1993 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1994 in this vector.
1995
1996 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1997 the treatment of leaf functions.
1998 @end defmac
1999
2000 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
2001 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
2002 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
2003
2004 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2005 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2006 will cause the compiler to abort.
2007
2008 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2009 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2010 this.
2011 @end defmac
2012
2013 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2014 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2015 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2016 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2017 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2018 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2019 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2020 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2021 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2022 functions which only use leaf registers.
2023 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2024 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2025 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2026 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2027 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2028
2029 @node Stack Registers
2030 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2031
2032 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2033 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2034 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2035 stack.
2036
2037 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2038 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2039 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2040 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2041 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2042 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2043 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2044
2045 @defmac STACK_REGS
2046 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2047 @end defmac
2048
2049 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2050 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2051 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2052 @end defmac
2053
2054 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2055 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2056 of the stack.
2057 @end defmac
2058
2059 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2060 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2061 the stack.
2062 @end defmac
2063
2064 @node Register Classes
2065 @section Register Classes
2066 @cindex register class definitions
2067 @cindex class definitions, register
2068
2069 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2070 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2071 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2072 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2073
2074 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2075 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2076 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2077
2078 @findex ALL_REGS
2079 @findex NO_REGS
2080 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2081 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2082 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2083 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2084
2085 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2086 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2087 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2088 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2089 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2090 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2091
2092 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2093 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2094
2095 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2096 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2097 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2098 them in operand constraints.
2099
2100 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2101 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2102 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2103 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2104 (@pxref{Costs}).
2105
2106 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2107 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2108 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2109 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2110 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2111 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2112 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2113
2114 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2115 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2116 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2117 in their union.
2118
2119 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2120 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2121 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2122 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2123 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2124
2125 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2126 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2127 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2128 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2129 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2130 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2131 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2132 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2133 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2134
2135 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2136 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2137 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2138 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2139 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2140 tells how many classes there are.
2141
2142 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2143 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2144 in many of the tables described below.
2145 @end deftp
2146
2147 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2148 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2149
2150 @smallexample
2151 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2152 @end smallexample
2153 @end defmac
2154
2155 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2156 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2157 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2158 @end defmac
2159
2160 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2161 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2162 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2163 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2164 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2165
2166 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2167 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2168 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2169 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2170 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2171 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2172 so on.
2173 @end defmac
2174
2175 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2176 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2177 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2178 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2179 register.
2180 @end defmac
2181
2182 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2183 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2184 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2185 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2186 @end defmac
2187
2188 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2189 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2190 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2191 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2192 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2193 @end defmac
2194
2195 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2196 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2197 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2198 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2199 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2200 @end defmac
2201
2202 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2203 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2204 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2205 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2206 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2207 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2208 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2209 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2210 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2211 @end defmac
2212
2213 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2214 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2215 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2216 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2217 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2218 @end defmac
2219
2220 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2221 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2222 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2223 @end defmac
2224
2225 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2226 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2227 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2228 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2229 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2230 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2231 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2232 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2233 @code{address_operand}.
2234 @end defmac
2235
2236 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2237 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2238 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2239 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2240 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2241 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2242 than other base register uses.
2243
2244 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2245 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2246 @end defmac
2247
2248 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2249 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2250 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2251 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2252 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2253 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2254 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2255 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2256 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2257 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2258 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2259 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2260 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2261 @end defmac
2262
2263 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2264 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2265 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2266 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2267 allocated such a hard register.
2268
2269 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2270 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2271 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2272 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2273 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2274 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2275 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2276 only if neither labeling works.
2277 @end defmac
2278
2279 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2280
2281 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2282
2283 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2284 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2285 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2286 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2287 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2288 safe:
2289
2290 @smallexample
2291 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2292 @end smallexample
2293
2294 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2295 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2296 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2297 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2298 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2299
2300 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2301 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2302 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2303 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2304 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2305 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2306 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2307 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2308 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2309 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2310 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2311
2312 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2313 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2314 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2315 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2316 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2317 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2318 @end defmac
2319
2320 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2321
2322 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2323 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2324 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2325 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2326 ordinarily be used.
2327
2328 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2329 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2330
2331 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2332 smaller class.
2333
2334 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2335 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2336 @end defmac
2337
2338 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2339
2340 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2341 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2342 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2343 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2344 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2345
2346 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2347 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2348 reload phase that it may
2349 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2350 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2351 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2352 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2353 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2354 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2355
2356 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2357 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2358 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2359 class required. If the
2360 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2361 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2362 macros identically.
2363
2364 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2365 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2366 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2367 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2368 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2369
2370 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2371 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2372 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2373 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2374 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2375 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2376 register.
2377
2378 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2379 register that
2380 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2381 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2382 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2383 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2384 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2385
2386 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2387 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2388 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2389 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2390
2391 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2392 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2393 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2394 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2395 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2396 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2397 general registers.
2398 @end defmac
2399
2400 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2401 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2402 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2403 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2404 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2405 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2406 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2407
2408 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2409 @end defmac
2410
2411 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2412 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2413 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2414 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2415 defined by this macro.
2416
2417 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2418 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2419 @end defmac
2420
2421 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2422 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2423 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2424 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2425 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2426 same as that of @var{mode}.
2427
2428 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2429 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2430 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2431 registers.
2432
2433 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2434 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2435 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2436 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2437 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2438 details.
2439
2440 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2441 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2442 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2443 @end defmac
2444
2445 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2446
2447 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2448
2449 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2450 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2451 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2452
2453 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2454 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2455 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2456 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2457
2458 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2459 in the reload pass.
2460 @end defmac
2461
2462 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2463 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2464 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2465
2466 For example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2467 floating-point registers on Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2468 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2469 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2470 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2471 as below:
2472
2473 @smallexample
2474 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2475 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2476 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2477 @end smallexample
2478
2479 Even if storing from a register in mode @var{to} would be valid,
2480 if both @var{from} and @code{raw_reg_mode} for @var{class} are wider
2481 than @code{word_mode}, then we must prevent @var{to} narrowing the
2482 mode. This happens when the middle-end assumes that it can load
2483 or store pieces of an @var{N}-word pseudo, and that the pseudo will
2484 eventually be allocated to @var{N} @code{word_mode} hard registers.
2485 Failure to prevent this kind of mode change will result in the
2486 entire @code{raw_reg_mode} being modified instead of the partial
2487 value that the middle-end intended.
2488
2489 @end defmac
2490
2491 @hook TARGET_IRA_CHANGE_PSEUDO_ALLOCNO_CLASS
2492
2493 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2494
2495 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2496
2497 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2498
2499 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2500
2501 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2502
2503 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS_DISPLACEMENT
2504
2505 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2506
2507 @hook TARGET_ADDITIONAL_ALLOCNO_CLASS_P
2508
2509 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2510
2511 @hook TARGET_COMPUTE_PRESSURE_CLASSES
2512
2513 @node Stack and Calling
2514 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2515 @cindex calling conventions
2516
2517 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2518 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2519
2520 @menu
2521 * Frame Layout::
2522 * Exception Handling::
2523 * Stack Checking::
2524 * Frame Registers::
2525 * Elimination::
2526 * Stack Arguments::
2527 * Register Arguments::
2528 * Scalar Return::
2529 * Aggregate Return::
2530 * Caller Saves::
2531 * Function Entry::
2532 * Profiling::
2533 * Tail Calls::
2534 * Shrink-wrapping separate components::
2535 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2536 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2537 @end menu
2538
2539 @node Frame Layout
2540 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2541 @cindex stack frame layout
2542 @cindex frame layout
2543
2544 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2545 Here is the basic stack layout.
2546
2547 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2548 Define this macro to be true if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2549 pointer to a smaller address, and false otherwise.
2550 @end defmac
2551
2552 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2553 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2554 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2555 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2556
2557 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2558 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2559 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2560 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2561 space for the next item on the stack.
2562
2563 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2564 true, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2565 which is often wrong.
2566 @end defmac
2567
2568 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2569 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2570 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2571 @end defmac
2572
2573 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2574 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2575 addresses on the stack.
2576 @end defmac
2577
2578 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2579 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2580
2581 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2582 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2583 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2584 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2585 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2586 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2587 @end defmac
2588
2589 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2590 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2591 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2592
2593 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2594 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2595 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2596 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2597 @end defmac
2598
2599 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2600 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2601 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2602 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2603
2604 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2605 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2606 @end defmac
2607
2608 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2609 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2610 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2611 function.
2612
2613 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2614 the first argument's address.
2615 @end defmac
2616
2617 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2618 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2619 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2620
2621 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2622 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2623 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2624 @end defmac
2625
2626 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2627 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2628 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2629 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2630 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2631 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2632 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2633 @end defmac
2634
2635 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2636 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2637 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2638 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2639 itself.
2640
2641 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2642 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2643 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2644 @end defmac
2645
2646 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2647 A C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2648 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2649 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2650 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2651 define this macro. The default is to do nothing.
2652 @end defmac
2653
2654 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2655
2656 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2657 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2658 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2659 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2660 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2661 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2662 @end defmac
2663
2664 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2665 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2666 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2667 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2668 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2669 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is nonzero.
2670
2671 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2672 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2673 determine the return address of other frames.
2674 @end defmac
2675
2676 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2677 Define this macro to nonzero value if the return address of a particular
2678 stack frame is accessed from the frame pointer of the previous stack
2679 frame. The zero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2680 @end defmac
2681
2682 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2683 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2684 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2685 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2686 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2687 the stack.
2688
2689 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2690 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2691
2692 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2693 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2694 @end defmac
2695
2696 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2697 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2698 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2699 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2700 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2701
2702 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2703 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2704 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2705 over time.
2706 @end defmac
2707
2708 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2709 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2710 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2711 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2712 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2713 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2714 @end defmac
2715
2716 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2717
2718 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2719 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2720 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2721 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2722 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2723 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2724
2725 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2726 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2727 @end defmac
2728
2729 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2730 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2731 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2732 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2733 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2734 during virtual register instantiation.
2735
2736 The default value for this macro is
2737 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2738 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2739 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2740 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2741 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2742
2743 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2744 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2745 DWARF 2.
2746 @end defmac
2747
2748 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2749 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2750 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2751 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2752 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2753
2754 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2755 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2756 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2757 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2758 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2759 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2760 should be defined.
2761 @end defmac
2762
2763 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2764 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2765 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2766 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2767 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2768 @end defmac
2769
2770 @node Exception Handling
2771 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2772 @cindex exception handling
2773
2774 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2775 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2776 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2777 @var{N} registers are usable.
2778
2779 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2780 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2781 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2782 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2783 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2784
2785 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2786 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2787 @end defmac
2788
2789 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2790 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2791 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2792 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2793 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2794
2795 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2796 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2797
2798 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2799 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2800 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2801 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2802 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2803 that provided by DWARF 2.
2804 @end defmac
2805
2806 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2807 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2808 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2809 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2810
2811 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2812 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2813 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2814 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2815 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2816 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2817 target call frame.
2818
2819 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2820 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2821 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2822
2823 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2824 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2825 @end defmac
2826
2827 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2828 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2829 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2830 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2831 using it to return to the exception handler.
2832 @end defmac
2833
2834 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2835 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2836 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2837 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2838 and so may be read-only.
2839
2840 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2841 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2842 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2843 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2844
2845 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2846 represented directly.
2847 @end defmac
2848
2849 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2850 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2851 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2852 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2853 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2854
2855 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2856 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2857 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2858 to be emitted.
2859 @end defmac
2860
2861 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2862 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2863 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2864 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2865 through signal frames.
2866
2867 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2868 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2869 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2870 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2871 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2872 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2873 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2874 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2875 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2876
2877 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2878 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2879 @end defmac
2880
2881 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2882 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2883 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2884 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2885
2886 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2887 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2888 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2889 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2890 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2891 be updated in @var{fs}.
2892 @end defmac
2893
2894 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2895 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2896 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2897 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2898 @end defmac
2899
2900 @node Stack Checking
2901 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2902
2903 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2904 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2905 three ways:
2906
2907 @enumerate
2908 @item
2909 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2910 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2911 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2912 other special processing.
2913
2914 @item
2915 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2916 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2917 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2918 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2919 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2920 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2921 approach below.
2922
2923 @item
2924 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2925 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2926 @end enumerate
2927
2928 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2929 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2930 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2931 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2932
2933 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2934 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2935 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2936 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2937 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2938 value of this macro is zero.
2939 @end defmac
2940
2941 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2942 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2943 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2944 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2945 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2946 @end defmac
2947
2948 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2949 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2950 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2951 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2952 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2953 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2954 @end defmac
2955
2956 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2957 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2958 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2959 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2960 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2961 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2962 default value of this macro is zero.
2963 @end defmac
2964
2965 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2966 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2967 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 4KB/8KB
2968 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2969 8KB/12KB with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for most
2970 architectures and operating systems.
2971 @end defmac
2972
2973 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2974 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2975 in the opposite case.
2976
2977 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2978 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2979 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2980 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2981 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2982 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2983 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2984 @end defmac
2985
2986 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2987 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2988 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2989 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2990 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2991 use the default of four words.
2992 @end defmac
2993
2994 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2995 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2996 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2997 @option{-fstack-check}.
2998 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2999 normally not need to override that default.
3000 @end defmac
3001
3002 @need 2000
3003 @node Frame Registers
3004 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
3005
3006 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3007 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
3008
3009 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
3010 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
3011 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
3012 the hardware determines which register this is.
3013 @end defmac
3014
3015 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3016 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
3017 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
3018 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
3019 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
3020 @end defmac
3021
3022 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3023 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3024 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3025 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3026 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3027 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3028 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3029 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3030 used for the frame pointer.
3031
3032 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3033 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3034 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3035 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3036 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3037 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3038 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3039
3040 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3041 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3042 @end defmac
3043
3044 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3045 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3046 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3047 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3048 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3049 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3050 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3051 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3052 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3053 @end defmac
3054
3055 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3056 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3057 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3058 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3059 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3060 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3061 @end defmac
3062
3063 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3064 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3065 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3066 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3067 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3068 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3069 @end defmac
3070
3071 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3072 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3073 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3074 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3075 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3076 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3077 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3078
3079 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3080 address from the stack.
3081 @end defmac
3082
3083 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3084 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3085 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3086 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3087 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3088 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3089 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3090 not be defined.
3091
3092 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3093
3094 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3095 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3096 @end defmac
3097
3098 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3099
3100 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3101 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3102 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3103 DWARF2 exception handling.
3104
3105 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3106 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3107 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3108 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3109 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3110 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3111 registers that are not call-saved.
3112
3113 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3114 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3115 @end defmac
3116
3117 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3118
3119 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3120 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3121
3122 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3123 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3124 @end defmac
3125
3126 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3127
3128 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3129 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3130 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3131 column number to use instead.
3132
3133 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3134 @end defmac
3135
3136 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3137
3138 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3139 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3140 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3141 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3142 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3143
3144 @end defmac
3145
3146 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3147
3148 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3149 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3150 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3151 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3152 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3153
3154 @end defmac
3155
3156 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3157
3158 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3159 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3160 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3161 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3162
3163 @end defmac
3164
3165 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3166
3167 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3168 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3169 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3170 defined and 0 otherwise.
3171
3172 @end defmac
3173
3174 @node Elimination
3175 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3176
3177 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3178 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3179
3180 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3181
3182 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3183 This macro specifies a table of register pairs used to eliminate
3184 unneeded registers that point into the stack frame.
3185
3186 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3187 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3188
3189 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3190 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3191 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3192 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3193 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3194
3195 In this case, you might specify:
3196 @smallexample
3197 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3198 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3199 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3200 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3201 @end smallexample
3202
3203 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3204 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3205 @end defmac
3206
3207 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3208
3209 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3210 This macro returns the initial difference between the specified pair
3211 of registers. The value would be computed from information
3212 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3213 registers @code{df_regs_ever_live_p} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3214 @end defmac
3215
3216 @node Stack Arguments
3217 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3218 @cindex arguments on stack
3219 @cindex stack arguments
3220
3221 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3222 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3223 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3224
3225 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3226
3227 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3228 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3229 outgoing arguments.
3230 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3231 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3232 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3233 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3234 @end defmac
3235
3236 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3237 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3238 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3239 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3240 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3241 @end defmac
3242
3243 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3244 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3245 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3246
3247 On some machines, the definition
3248
3249 @smallexample
3250 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3251 @end smallexample
3252
3253 @noindent
3254 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3255 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3256 alignment. Then the definition should be
3257
3258 @smallexample
3259 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3260 @end smallexample
3261
3262 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3263 @end defmac
3264
3265 @findex outgoing_args_size
3266 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3267 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3268 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3269 will be computed and placed into
3270 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3271 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3272 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3273
3274 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3275 is not proper.
3276 @end defmac
3277
3278 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3279 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3280 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3281 registers.
3282
3283 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3284 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3285 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3286 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3287 of the function.
3288
3289 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3290 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3291 which.
3292 @end defmac
3293 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3294 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3295
3296 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3297 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3298 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3299 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3300 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3301 @end defmac
3302
3303 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3304 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3305 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3306 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3307 if the function called is a library function.
3308
3309 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3310 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3311 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3312 @end defmac
3313
3314 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3315 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3316 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3317 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3318 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3319
3320 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3321 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3322 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3323 stack in its natural location.
3324 @end defmac
3325
3326 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3327
3328 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3329 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3330 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3331 when compiling a function call.
3332
3333 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3334 have been accumulated.
3335
3336 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3337 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3338 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3339 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3340 appropriate.
3341 @end defmac
3342
3343 @node Register Arguments
3344 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3345 @cindex arguments in registers
3346 @cindex registers arguments
3347
3348 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3349 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3350 the stack.
3351
3352 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3353
3354 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3355
3356 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3357
3358 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3359
3360 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3361
3362 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3363
3364 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3365
3366 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3367
3368 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3369 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3370 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3371 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3372 of bytes of argument so far.
3373
3374 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3375 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3376 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3377 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3378 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3379 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3380 @end defmac
3381
3382 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3383 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3384 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3385 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3386 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3387 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3388 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3389 @end defmac
3390
3391 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3392 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3393 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3394 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3395 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3396 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3397 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3398 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3399 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3400 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3401 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3402 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3403 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3404
3405 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3406 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3407 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3408 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3409 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3410 never both of them at once.
3411 @end defmac
3412
3413 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3414 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3415 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3416 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3417 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3418 0)} is used instead.
3419 @end defmac
3420
3421 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3422 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3423 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3424 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3425
3426 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3427 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3428 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3429 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3430 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3431 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3432 @end defmac
3433
3434 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3435
3436 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3437 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3438 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3439 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3440 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3441 top.
3442 @end defmac
3443
3444 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3445 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3446 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3447 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3448 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3449
3450 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3451 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3452 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3453
3454 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3455 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3456 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3457 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3458 @end defmac
3459
3460 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3461 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3462 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3463 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3464 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3465 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3466 @end defmac
3467
3468 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3469 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3470 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3471 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3472 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3473 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3474 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3475 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3476 required.
3477 @end defmac
3478
3479 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3480
3481 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3482
3483 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3484 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3485 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3486 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3487 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3488 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3489 stack.
3490 @end defmac
3491
3492 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3493
3494 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3495
3496 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3497
3498 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3499
3500 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3501
3502 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3503
3504 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3505
3506 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3507
3508 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3509
3510 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3511
3512 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3513
3514 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3515
3516 @hook TARGET_FLOATN_MODE
3517
3518 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3519
3520 @node Scalar Return
3521 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3522 @cindex return values in registers
3523 @cindex values, returned by functions
3524 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3525
3526 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3527 values---values that can fit in registers.
3528
3529 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3530
3531 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3532 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3533 a new target instead.
3534 @end defmac
3535
3536 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3537 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3538 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3539
3540 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3541 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3542 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3543 compiled.
3544 @end defmac
3545
3546 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3547
3548 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3549 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3550 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3551
3552 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3553 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3554 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3555 suffices:
3556
3557 @smallexample
3558 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3559 @end smallexample
3560
3561 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3562 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3563 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3564
3565 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3566 for a new target instead.
3567 @end defmac
3568
3569 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3570
3571 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3572 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3573 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3574 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3575 @end defmac
3576
3577 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3578
3579 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3580
3581 @node Aggregate Return
3582 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3583 @cindex aggregates as return values
3584 @cindex large return values
3585 @cindex returning aggregate values
3586 @cindex structure value address
3587
3588 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3589 cases), the value is not returned according to
3590 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3591 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3592 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3593 address}.
3594
3595 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3596 memory.
3597
3598 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3599
3600 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3601 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3602 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3603 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3604 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3605 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3606 target hook.
3607
3608 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3609 @end defmac
3610
3611 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3612
3613 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3614 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3615 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3616 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3617
3618 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3619 pass an address to the subroutine.
3620
3621 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3622 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3623 @end defmac
3624
3625 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3626
3627 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3628
3629 @node Caller Saves
3630 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3631
3632 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3633 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3634 must live across calls.
3635
3636 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3637 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3638 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3639 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3640 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3641 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3642 @end defmac
3643
3644 @node Function Entry
3645 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3646 @cindex function entry and exit
3647 @cindex prologue
3648 @cindex epilogue
3649
3650 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3651 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3652
3653 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3654
3655 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3656
3657 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3658
3659 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3660
3661 @itemize @bullet
3662 @item
3663 @findex pretend_args_size
3664 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3665 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3666 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3667 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3668 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3669 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3670 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3671 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3672 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3673 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3674
3675 @item
3676 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3677 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3678 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3679 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3680 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3681 a save area.
3682
3683 @item
3684 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3685 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3686 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3687 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3688
3689 @item
3690 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3691 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3692 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3693 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3694 @end itemize
3695
3696 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3697 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3698 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3699 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3700 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3701 default is 0.
3702
3703 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3704 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3705 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3706 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3707 @end defmac
3708
3709 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3710 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3711 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3712 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3713 @end defmac
3714
3715 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3716 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3717 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3718 on entry to an exception edge.
3719 @end defmac
3720
3721 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3722
3723 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3724
3725 @node Profiling
3726 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3727 @cindex profiling, code generation
3728
3729 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3730
3731 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3732 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3733 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3734
3735 @findex mcount
3736 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3737 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3738 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3739 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3740
3741 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3742 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3743 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3744 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3745 @end defmac
3746
3747 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3748 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3749 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3750 not support profiling.
3751 @end defmac
3752
3753 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3754 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3755 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3756 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3757 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3758 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3759 @end defmac
3760
3761 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3762 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3763 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3764 @end defmac
3765
3766 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3767
3768 @node Tail Calls
3769 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3770 @cindex tail calls
3771
3772 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3773
3774 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3775
3776 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3777
3778 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3779
3780 @node Shrink-wrapping separate components
3781 @subsection Shrink-wrapping separate components
3782 @cindex shrink-wrapping separate components
3783
3784 The prologue may perform a variety of target dependent tasks such as
3785 saving callee-saved registers, saving the return address, aligning the
3786 stack, creating a stack frame, initializing the PIC register, setting
3787 up the static chain, etc.
3788
3789 On some targets some of these tasks may be independent of others and
3790 thus may be shrink-wrapped separately. These independent tasks are
3791 referred to as components and are handled generically by the target
3792 independent parts of GCC.
3793
3794 Using the following hooks those prologue or epilogue components can be
3795 shrink-wrapped separately, so that the initialization (and possibly
3796 teardown) those components do is not done as frequently on execution
3797 paths where this would unnecessary.
3798
3799 What exactly those components are is up to the target code; the generic
3800 code treats them abstractly, as a bit in an @code{sbitmap}. These
3801 @code{sbitmap}s are allocated by the @code{shrink_wrap.get_separate_components}
3802 and @code{shrink_wrap.components_for_bb} hooks, and deallocated by the
3803 generic code.
3804
3805 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_GET_SEPARATE_COMPONENTS
3806
3807 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_COMPONENTS_FOR_BB
3808
3809 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_DISQUALIFY_COMPONENTS
3810
3811 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_PROLOGUE_COMPONENTS
3812
3813 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_EMIT_EPILOGUE_COMPONENTS
3814
3815 @hook TARGET_SHRINK_WRAP_SET_HANDLED_COMPONENTS
3816
3817 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3818 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3819 @cindex stack smashing protection
3820
3821 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3822
3823 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3824
3825 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_RUNTIME_ENABLED_P
3826
3827 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3828
3829 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3830 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3831 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3832
3833 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3834
3835 @node Varargs
3836 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3837 @cindex varargs implementation
3838
3839 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3840 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3841 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3842 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3843 conditionals to include it.
3844
3845 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3846 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3847 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3848 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3849 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3850 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3851
3852 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3853 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3854 below.
3855
3856 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3857 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3858 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3859 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3860 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3861
3862 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3863 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3864 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3865 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3866
3867 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3868 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3869 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3870 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3871 to use them for its own purposes.
3872 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3873 @c 10feb93
3874 @end defmac
3875
3876 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3877 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3878 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3879 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3880 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3881 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3882 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3883 of the current function.
3884 @end defmac
3885
3886 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3887 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3888 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3889 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3890 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3891 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3892
3893 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3894 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3895 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3896
3897 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3898 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3899 @end defmac
3900
3901 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3902
3903 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3904
3905 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3906
3907 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3908
3909 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3910
3911 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3912
3913 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3914
3915 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3916
3917 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3918
3919 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3920
3921 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3922
3923 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3924
3925 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3926
3927 @node Trampolines
3928 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3929 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3930 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3931
3932 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3933 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3934 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3935 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3936 trampoline.
3937
3938 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3939 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3940 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3941 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3942 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3943 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3944 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3945 operands.
3946
3947 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3948 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3949 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3950 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3951 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3952 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3953 separately.
3954
3955 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3956
3957 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3958 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3959 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3960 @end defmac
3961
3962 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3963 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3964 @end defmac
3965
3966 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3967 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3968
3969 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3970 is used for aligning trampolines.
3971 @end defmac
3972
3973 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3974
3975 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3976
3977 @hook TARGET_CUSTOM_FUNCTION_DESCRIPTORS
3978
3979 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3980 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3981 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3982 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3983
3984 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3985 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3986 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3987 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3988 latter makes initialization faster.
3989
3990 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3991 the following macro.
3992
3993 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3994 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3995 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3996 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3997 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3998 @end defmac
3999
4000 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
4001 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
4002 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
4003 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
4004 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
4005
4006 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
4007 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
4008 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
4009 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
4010 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
4011
4012 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
4013 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
4014 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
4015 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
4016 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
4017 special assembler code.
4018 @end defmac
4019
4020 @node Library Calls
4021 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
4022 @cindex library subroutine names
4023 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
4024
4025 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4026 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
4027
4028 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
4029 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
4030 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
4031 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
4032 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
4033 @end defmac
4034
4035 @findex set_optab_libfunc
4036 @findex init_one_libfunc
4037 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
4038
4039 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
4040
4041 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4042 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
4043 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
4044 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
4045 return a tristate.
4046
4047 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4048 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4049 don't need to define this macro.
4050 @end defmac
4051
4052 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4053 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4054 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4055 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4056 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4057 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4058 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4059 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4060 @end defmac
4061
4062 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4063 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4064 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4065 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4066 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4067 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4068 @end defmac
4069
4070 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4071 @findex matherr
4072 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4073 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4074 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4075 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4076 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4077 system.
4078
4079 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4080 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4081 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4082 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4083 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4084 @end defmac
4085
4086 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4087 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4088 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4089 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4090 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4091 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4092 @end defmac
4093
4094 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4095
4096 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4097 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4098 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4099 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4100 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4101 the NeXT runtime installed.
4102
4103 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4104 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4105 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4106
4107 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4108 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4109 @end defmac
4110
4111 @node Addressing Modes
4112 @section Addressing Modes
4113 @cindex addressing modes
4114
4115 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4116 This is about addressing modes.
4117
4118 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4119 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4120 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4121 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4122 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4123 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4124 @end defmac
4125
4126 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4127 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4128 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4129 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4130 the size of the memory operand.
4131 @end defmac
4132
4133 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4134 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4135 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4136 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4137 @end defmac
4138
4139 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4140 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4141 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4142 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4143 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4144 constant addresses are supported.
4145 @end defmac
4146
4147 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4148 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4149 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4150 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4151 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4152 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4153 @end defmac
4154
4155 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4156 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4157 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4158 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4159 accept.
4160 @end defmac
4161
4162 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4163
4164 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4165 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4166 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4167 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4168 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4169 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4170 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4171 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4172 @code{'m'} constraint.
4173 @end defmac
4174
4175 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4176 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4177 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4178 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4179 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4180
4181 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4182 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4183
4184 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4185 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4186 @end defmac
4187
4188 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4189
4190 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4191 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4192 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4193 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4194 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4195 performance reasons.
4196
4197 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4198 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4199 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4200 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4201 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4202 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4203 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4204 be shared.
4205
4206 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4207 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4208 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4209 of reload internals.
4210
4211 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4212 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4213 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4214
4215 @findex push_reload
4216 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4217 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4218 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4219
4220 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4221 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4222 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4223 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4224 @code{push_reload}.
4225
4226 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4227 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4228 the address has become legitimate.
4229
4230 @findex copy_rtx
4231 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4232 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4233 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4234 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4235 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4236 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4237 @end defmac
4238
4239 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4240
4241 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4242
4243 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4244
4245 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4246
4247 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4248
4249 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4250
4251 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4252
4253 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4254
4255 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4256
4257 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4258
4259 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4260
4261 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4262
4263 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4264
4265 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4266
4267 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MD_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4268
4269 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4270
4271 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4272
4273 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4274
4275 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_GET_MASK_MODE
4276
4277 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4278
4279 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4280
4281 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4282
4283 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4284
4285 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4286
4287 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_SCATTER
4288
4289 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4290
4291 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4292
4293 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4294
4295 @hook TARGET_SIMT_VF
4296
4297 @hook TARGET_GOACC_VALIDATE_DIMS
4298
4299 @hook TARGET_GOACC_DIM_LIMIT
4300
4301 @hook TARGET_GOACC_FORK_JOIN
4302
4303 @hook TARGET_GOACC_REDUCTION
4304
4305 @node Anchored Addresses
4306 @section Anchored Addresses
4307 @cindex anchored addresses
4308 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4309
4310 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4311 For example, if we have:
4312
4313 @smallexample
4314 static int a, b, c;
4315 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4316 @end smallexample
4317
4318 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4319 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4320 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4321 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4322 be something like:
4323
4324 @smallexample
4325 int foo (void)
4326 @{
4327 register int *xr = &x;
4328 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4329 @}
4330 @end smallexample
4331
4332 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4333 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4334
4335 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4336 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4337 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4338 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4339
4340 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4341
4342 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4343
4344 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4345
4346 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4347
4348 @node Condition Code
4349 @section Condition Code Status
4350 @cindex condition code status
4351
4352 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4353 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4354
4355 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4356 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4357 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4358 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4359 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4360 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4361 most RISC machines.
4362
4363 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4364 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4365 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4366 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4367 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4368 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4369
4370 These restrictions can prevent important
4371 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4372 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4373 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4374 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4375 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4376
4377 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4378 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4379 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4380 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4381 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4382 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4383 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4384
4385 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4386 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4387 interested in most macros in this section.
4388
4389 @menu
4390 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4391 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4392 @end menu
4393
4394 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4395 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4396 @findex cc0
4397
4398 @findex cc_status
4399 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4400 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4401 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4402 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4403 currently based, and several standard flags.
4404
4405 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4406 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4407 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4408
4409 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4410 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4411 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4412
4413 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4414 @end defmac
4415
4416 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4417 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4418 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4419 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4420 define this macro to initialize it.
4421
4422 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4423 @end defmac
4424
4425 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4426 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4427 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4428 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4429 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4430 set @code{(cc0)}.
4431
4432 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4433
4434 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4435 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4436 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4437 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4438 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4439 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4440 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4441 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4442 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4443 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4444 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4445 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4446 condition code value.
4447
4448 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4449 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4450 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4451 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4452 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4453 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4454 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4455
4456 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4457 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4458 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4459 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4460 @end defmac
4461
4462 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4463 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4464 @findex CCmode
4465 @findex MODE_CC
4466
4467 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4468 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4469 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4470 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4471 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4472 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4473 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4474 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4475 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4476 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4477 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4478
4479 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4480 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4481 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4482 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4483 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4484 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4485 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4486
4487 @smallexample
4488 (define_insn ""
4489 [(set (reg:CCNZ 0)
4490 (compare:CCNZ
4491 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4492 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4493 (const_int 0)))]
4494 ""
4495 "@dots{}")
4496 @end smallexample
4497
4498 @noindent
4499 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CCNZmode}
4500 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4501
4502 @smallexample
4503 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4504 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4505 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4506 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4507 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4508 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4509 ? CCNZmode : CCmode))
4510 @end smallexample
4511
4512 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4513 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4514 this section.
4515
4516 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4517 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4518 @end defmac
4519
4520 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4521
4522 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4523 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4524 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4525 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4526 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4527
4528 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4529 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4530 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4531 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4532
4533 @smallexample
4534 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4535 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4536 @end smallexample
4537 @end defmac
4538
4539 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4540 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4541 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4542 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4543 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4544 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4545 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4546 like:
4547
4548 @smallexample
4549 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4550 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4551 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4552 @end smallexample
4553 @end defmac
4554
4555 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4556
4557 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4558
4559 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4560
4561 @node Costs
4562 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4563 @cindex costs of instructions
4564 @cindex relative costs
4565 @cindex speed of instructions
4566
4567 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4568 on the target machine.
4569
4570 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4571 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4572 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4573 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4574 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4575 that.
4576
4577 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4578 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4579 registers if they are not general registers.
4580
4581 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4582 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4583 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4584 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4585 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4586 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4587
4588 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4589 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4590 @end defmac
4591
4592 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4593
4594 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4595 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4596 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4597 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4598 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4599 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4600 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4601
4602 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4603 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4604 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4605 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4606 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4607 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4608
4609 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4610 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4611 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4612 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4613 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4614 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4615 are the same as to this macro.
4616
4617 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4618 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4619 @end defmac
4620
4621 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4622
4623 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4624 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4625 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4626 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4627 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4628 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4629 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4630 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4631 @end defmac
4632
4633 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4634 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4635 ordinarily expect.
4636
4637 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4638 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4639 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4640 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4641 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4642 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4643
4644 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4645 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4646 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4647 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4648 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4649 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4650 @end defmac
4651
4652 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4653 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4654 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4655 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4656 handler. This macro is invoked only for unaligned accesses, i.e. when
4657 @code{@var{alignment} < GET_MODE_ALIGNMENT (@var{mode})}.
4658
4659 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4660 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4661 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4662 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4663 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4664
4665 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4666 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4667 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4668 @end defmac
4669
4670 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4671 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4672 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4673 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4674 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4675
4676 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4677 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4678 the number of such sequences.
4679
4680 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4681 optimized for speed rather than size.
4682
4683 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4684 @end defmac
4685
4686 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4687
4688 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_BY_PIECES_BRANCH_RATIO
4689
4690 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4691 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4692 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4693 @end defmac
4694
4695 @defmac STORE_MAX_PIECES
4696 A C expression used by @code{store_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4697 a store used to memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}, or two times
4698 the size of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, whichever is smaller.
4699 @end defmac
4700
4701 @defmac COMPARE_MAX_PIECES
4702 A C expression used by @code{compare_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4703 a load or store used to compare memory is. Defaults to
4704 @code{MOVE_MAX_PIECES}.
4705 @end defmac
4706
4707 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4708 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4709 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4710 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4711 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4712
4713 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4714 optimized for speed rather than size.
4715
4716 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4717 @end defmac
4718
4719 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4720 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4721 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4722 a block set insn or a library call.
4723 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4724 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4725
4726 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4727 optimized for speed rather than size.
4728
4729 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4730 @end defmac
4731
4732 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4733 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4734 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4735 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4736 @end defmac
4737
4738 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4739 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4740 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4741 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4742 @end defmac
4743
4744 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4745 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4746 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4747 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4748 @end defmac
4749
4750 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4751 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4752 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4753 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4754 @end defmac
4755
4756 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4757 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4758 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4759 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4760 @end defmac
4761
4762 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4763 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4764 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4765 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4766 @end defmac
4767
4768 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4769 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4770 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4771 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4772 @end defmac
4773
4774 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4775 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4776 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4777 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4778 @end defmac
4779
4780 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4781 Define this macro to be true if it is as good or better to call a constant
4782 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4783 @end defmac
4784
4785 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4786 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4787 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4788 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4789 @end defmac
4790
4791 @hook TARGET_OPTAB_SUPPORTED_P
4792
4793 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4794
4795 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4796
4797 @hook TARGET_MAX_NOCE_IFCVT_SEQ_COST
4798
4799 @hook TARGET_NO_SPECULATION_IN_DELAY_SLOTS_P
4800
4801 @node Scheduling
4802 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4803
4804 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4805 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4806 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4807 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4808
4809 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4810
4811 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4812
4813 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4814
4815 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4816
4817 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4818
4819 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4820
4821 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4822
4823 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4824
4825 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4826
4827 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4828
4829 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4830
4831 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4832
4833 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4834
4835 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4836
4837 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4838
4839 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4840
4841 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4842
4843 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4844
4845 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4846
4847 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4848
4849 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4850
4851 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4852
4853 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4854
4855 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4856
4857 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4858
4859 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4860
4861 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4862
4863 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4864
4865 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4866
4867 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4868
4869 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4870
4871 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4872
4873 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4874
4875 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4876
4877 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4878
4879 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4880
4881 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4882
4883 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4884
4885 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4886
4887 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CAN_SPECULATE_INSN
4888
4889 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4890
4891 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4892
4893 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4894
4895 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4896
4897 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4898
4899 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4900
4901 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_DIVMOD_LIBFUNC
4902
4903 @node Sections
4904 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4905 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4906 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4907
4908 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4909 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4910 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4911 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4912 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4913 of sections.
4914
4915 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4916 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4917 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4918 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4919 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4920 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4921 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4922
4923 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4924 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4925 to be string literals.
4926
4927 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4928 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4929 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4930 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4931
4932 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4933 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4934 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4935 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4936 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4937 reuse @code{text_section}.
4938
4939 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4940 if the target does not provide them.
4941
4942 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4943 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4944 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4945 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4946 @end defmac
4947
4948 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4949 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4950 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4951 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4952 @end defmac
4953
4954 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4955 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4956 executed functions in the program.
4957 @end defmac
4958
4959 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4960 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4961 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4962 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4963 @end defmac
4964
4965 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4966 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4967 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4968 initialized, writable small data.
4969 @end defmac
4970
4971 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4972 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4973 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4974 data.
4975 @end defmac
4976
4977 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4978 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4979 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4980 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4981 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4982 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4983 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4984 used.
4985 @end defmac
4986
4987 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4988 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4989 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4990 uninitialized, writable small data.
4991 @end defmac
4992
4993 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4994 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4995 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4996 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4997 @end defmac
4998
4999 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
5000 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
5001 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
5002 default is @code{'T'}.
5003 @end defmac
5004
5005 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5006 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5007 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5008 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
5009 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
5010 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
5011 @end defmac
5012
5013 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
5014 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5015 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5016 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
5017 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
5018 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
5019 @end defmac
5020
5021 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
5022 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5023 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5024 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
5025 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
5026 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5027 @end defmac
5028
5029 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
5030 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
5031 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
5032 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
5033 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
5034 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5035 @end defmac
5036
5037 @defmac MACH_DEP_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
5038 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
5039 containing the flag used to mark a machine-dependent section. This
5040 corresponds to the @code{SECTION_MACH_DEP} section flag.
5041 @end defmac
5042
5043 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
5044 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
5045 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
5046 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
5047 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
5048 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
5049 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
5050 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
5051 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
5052 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
5053 @end defmac
5054
5055 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
5056 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
5057 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
5058 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
5059 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
5060 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
5061 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
5062 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
5063 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
5064 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
5065 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
5066 @end defmac
5067
5068 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
5069 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
5070 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
5071 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
5072 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
5073 @end defmac
5074
5075 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
5076 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
5077 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
5078 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
5079 readonly data section is used.
5080
5081 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
5082 @end defmac
5083
5084 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
5085
5086 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
5087
5088 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
5089
5090 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5091 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5092 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5093
5094 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5095 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5096 it is unlikely to be called.
5097 @end defmac
5098
5099 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5100
5101 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5102
5103 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5104
5105 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5106
5107 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5108
5109 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5110
5111 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5112
5113 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5114
5115 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5116
5117 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5118
5119 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5120
5121 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5122
5123 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5124
5125
5126 @node PIC
5127 @section Position Independent Code
5128 @cindex position independent code
5129 @cindex PIC
5130
5131 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5132 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5133 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5134 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5135 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5136 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5137 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5138 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5139 relative addresses.
5140 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5141 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5142
5143 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5144 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5145 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5146 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5147 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5148 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5149 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5150 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5151 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5152 @end defmac
5153
5154 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5155 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5156 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5157 the default is zero. Do not define
5158 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5159 @end defmac
5160
5161 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5162 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5163 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5164 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5165 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5166 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5167 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5168 position independent code.
5169 @end defmac
5170
5171 @node Assembler Format
5172 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5173
5174 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5175 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5176 instructions do.
5177
5178 @menu
5179 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5180 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5181 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5182 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5183 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5184 and termination routines.
5185 * Macros for Initialization::
5186 Specific macros that control the handling of
5187 initialization and termination routines.
5188 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5189 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5190 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5191 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5192 @end menu
5193
5194 @node File Framework
5195 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5196 @cindex assembler format
5197 @cindex output of assembler code
5198
5199 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5200 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5201
5202 @findex default_file_start
5203 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5204
5205 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5206
5207 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5208
5209 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5210
5211 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5212 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5213 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5214 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5215 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5216 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5217 this function.
5218 @end deftypefun
5219
5220 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5221
5222 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5223
5224 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5225
5226 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5227 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5228 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5229 the end of the line.
5230 @end defmac
5231
5232 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5233 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5234 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5235 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5236 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5237 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5238 @end defmac
5239
5240 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5241 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5242 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5243 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5244 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5245 @end defmac
5246
5247 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5248 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5249 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5250 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5251
5252 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5253 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5254 @end defmac
5255
5256 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5257
5258 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5259
5260 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5261 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5262 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5263 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5264 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5265 of the filename using this macro.
5266 @end defmac
5267
5268 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5269
5270 @hook TARGET_ASM_ELF_FLAGS_NUMERIC
5271
5272 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5273
5274 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5275
5276 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5277 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5278 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5279 @end deftypevr
5280
5281 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5282 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5283
5284 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5285
5286 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5287
5288 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5289
5290 @need 2000
5291 @node Data Output
5292 @subsection Output of Data
5293
5294
5295 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5296
5297 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5298
5299 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5300
5301 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5302
5303 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5304 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5305 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5306 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5307 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5308
5309 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5310 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5311 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5312 @end defmac
5313
5314 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5315 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5316 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5317 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5318 @end defmac
5319
5320 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5321 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5322 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5323 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5324 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5325 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5326 pool before the function.
5327 @end defmac
5328
5329 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5330 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5331 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5332 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5333 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5334 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5335 immediately after this call.
5336
5337 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5338 not be defined.
5339 @end defmac
5340
5341 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5342 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5343 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5344 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5345
5346 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5347 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5348 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5349 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5350 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5351 alignment.
5352
5353 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5354 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5355 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5356 Here is how to do this:
5357
5358 @smallexample
5359 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5360 @end smallexample
5361
5362 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5363 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5364 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5365
5366 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5367 @end defmac
5368
5369 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5370 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5371 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5372 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5373 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5374 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5375
5376 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5377 define this macro.
5378 @end defmac
5379
5380 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5381 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5382 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5383 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5384 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5385
5386 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5387 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5388 @end defmac
5389
5390 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5391
5392 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5393 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5394
5395 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5396 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5397 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5398 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5399 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5400 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5401 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5402 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5403 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5404 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5405 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5406 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5407 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5408 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5409 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5410 on the host machine.
5411
5412 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5413 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5414 machine's memory.
5415 @end defmac
5416
5417 @node Uninitialized Data
5418 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5419
5420 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5421 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5422
5423 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5424 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5425 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5426 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5427 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5428 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5429 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5430 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5431 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5432 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5433 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5434 an ordinary undefined external.
5435
5436 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5437 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5438 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5439
5440 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5441 common global variables are output.
5442 @end defmac
5443
5444 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5445 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5446 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5447 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5448 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5449 as the number of bits.
5450 @end defmac
5451
5452 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5453 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5454 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5455 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5456 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5457 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5458 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5459 @end defmac
5460
5461 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5462 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5463 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5464 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5465 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5466
5467 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5468 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5469 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5470 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5471 the name, and a newline.
5472
5473 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5474 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5475 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5476 You do not need to do both.
5477
5478 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5479 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5480 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5481 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5482 common in order to save space in the object file.
5483 @end defmac
5484
5485 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5486 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5487 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5488 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5489 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5490
5491 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5492 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5493 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5494
5495 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5496 static variables are output.
5497 @end defmac
5498
5499 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5500 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5501 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5502 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5503 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5504 as the number of bits.
5505 @end defmac
5506
5507 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5508 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5509 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5510 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5511 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5512 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5513 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5514 @end defmac
5515
5516 @node Label Output
5517 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5518
5519 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5520 This is about outputting labels.
5521
5522 @findex assemble_name
5523 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5524 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5525 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5526 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5527 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5528 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5529 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5530 @end defmac
5531
5532 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5533 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5534 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5535 a function.
5536 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5537 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5538 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5539 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5540
5541 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5542 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5543 @end defmac
5544
5545 @findex assemble_name_raw
5546 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5547 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5548 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5549 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5550 that it is more efficient.
5551 @end defmac
5552
5553 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5554 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5555 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5556 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5557 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5558
5559 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5560 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5561 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5562 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5563 define this macro.
5564 @end defmac
5565
5566 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5567 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5568 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5569 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5570 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5571 provided.
5572 @end defmac
5573
5574 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5575 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5576 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5577 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5578 address.
5579
5580 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5581 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5582 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5583 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5584 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5585 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5586 @end defmac
5587
5588 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5589 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5590 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5591 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5592 @samp{.} is used instead.
5593 @end defmac
5594
5595 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5596 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5597 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5598 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5599 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5600 @end defmac
5601
5602 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5603 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5604 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5605 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5606 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5607
5608 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5609 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5610 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5611 types at all, do not define this macro.
5612 @end defmac
5613
5614 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5615 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5616 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5617 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5618 the default is not to define this macro.
5619
5620 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5621 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5622 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5623 types at all, do not define this macro.
5624 @end defmac
5625
5626 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5627 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5628 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5629 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5630 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5631 you should not count on this.
5632
5633 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5634 definition of this macro is provided.
5635 @end defmac
5636
5637 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5638 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5639 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5640 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5641 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5642 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5643 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5644
5645 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5646 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5647
5648 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5649 of this macro.
5650 @end defmac
5651
5652 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5653 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5654 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5655 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5656 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5657 representing the function.
5658
5659 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5660
5661 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5662 of this macro.
5663 @end defmac
5664
5665 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5666 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5667 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5668 cold function partition which is being defined. This macro is responsible
5669 for outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5670 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5671 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5672
5673 If this macro is not defined, then the cold partition name is defined in the
5674 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5675
5676 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5677 of this macro.
5678 @end defmac
5679
5680 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_COLD_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5681 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5682 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a cold function
5683 partition which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5684 cold partition of the function. The argument @var{decl} is the
5685 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5686
5687 If this macro is not defined, then the partition size is not defined.
5688
5689 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5690 of this macro.
5691 @end defmac
5692
5693 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5694 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5695 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5696 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5697 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5698 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5699
5700 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5701 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5702
5703 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5704 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5705 @end defmac
5706
5707 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5708
5709 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5710 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5711 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5712 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5713
5714 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5715 nothing.
5716 @end defmac
5717
5718 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5719 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5720 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5721 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5722 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5723 something about the size of the object.
5724
5725 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5726 nothing.
5727
5728 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5729 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5730 @end defmac
5731
5732 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5733
5734 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5735
5736 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5737
5738 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5739 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5740 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5741 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5742 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5743 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5744 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5745 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5746
5747 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5748 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5749 macro.
5750 @end defmac
5751
5752 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5753 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5754 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5755 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5756 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5757 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5758 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5759 to make @var{name} weak.
5760 @end defmac
5761
5762 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5763 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5764 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5765 declaration of @code{name}.
5766 @end defmac
5767
5768 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5769 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5770 supports weak symbols.
5771
5772 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5773 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5774 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5775 @end defmac
5776
5777 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5778 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5779
5780 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5781 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5782 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5783 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5784 @end defmac
5785
5786 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5787 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5788 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5789 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5790 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5791 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5792 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5793 @end defmac
5794
5795 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5796 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5797 semantics.
5798
5799 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5800 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5801 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5802 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5803 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5804 be emitted as one-only.
5805 @end defmac
5806
5807 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5808
5809 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5810 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5811 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5812 The default is @code{0}.
5813
5814 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5815 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5816 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5817 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5818 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5819 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5820 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5821
5822 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5823 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5824 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5825 table of contents.
5826 @end defmac
5827
5828 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5829 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5830 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5831 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5832 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5833 declaration.
5834
5835 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5836 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5837 @end defmac
5838
5839 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5840
5841 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5842
5843 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5844 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5845 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5846 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5847 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5848 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5849 @end defmac
5850
5851 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5852
5853 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5854 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5855 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5856 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5857 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5858 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5859 @end defmac
5860
5861 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5862 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5863 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5864 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5865 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5866 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5867 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5868 being taken.
5869 @end defmac
5870
5871 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5872
5873 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5874 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5875 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5876 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5877 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5878 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5879 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5880 bundles.
5881
5882 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5883 used.
5884 @end defmac
5885
5886 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5887 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5888 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5889
5890 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5891 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5892 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5893
5894 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5895 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5896 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5897 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5898 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5899 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5900 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5901 @end defmac
5902
5903 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5904 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5905 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5906 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5907 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5908
5909 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5910 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5911 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5912 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5913 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5914 internal static variables in different scopes.
5915
5916 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5917 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5918 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5919 between the name and the number will suffice.
5920
5921 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5922 which is correct for most systems.
5923 @end defmac
5924
5925 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5926 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5927 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5928
5929 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5930 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5931 correct for most systems.
5932 @end defmac
5933
5934 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5935 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5936 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5937 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5938 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5939 the tree nodes are available.
5940
5941 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5942 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5943 correct for most systems.
5944 @end defmac
5945
5946 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5947 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5948 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5949 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5950 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5951 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5952 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5953 @end defmac
5954
5955 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5956 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5957 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5958 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5959 an undefined weak symbol.
5960
5961 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5962 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5963 @end defmac
5964
5965 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5966 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5967 Objective-C methods.
5968
5969 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5970 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5971 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5972 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5973
5974 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5975 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5976 systems define other ways of computing names.
5977
5978 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5979 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5980 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5981 50 characters extra.
5982
5983 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5984 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5985 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5986 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5987
5988 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5989 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5990 @end defmac
5991
5992 @node Initialization
5993 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5994 @cindex initialization routines
5995 @cindex termination routines
5996 @cindex constructors, output of
5997 @cindex destructors, output of
5998
5999 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
6000 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
6001 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
6002 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
6003 @code{main} is called.
6004
6005 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
6006 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
6007 terminates.
6008
6009 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
6010 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
6011 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
6012 system, you need to specify how to do this.
6013
6014 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
6015 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
6016 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
6017
6018 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
6019 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
6020 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
6021 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
6022 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
6023
6024 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
6025 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
6026 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
6027 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
6028 pointer containing zero.
6029
6030 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
6031 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
6032 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
6033 list; destructors in forward order.
6034
6035 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
6036 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
6037 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
6038 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
6039 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
6040 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
6041 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
6042 Termination functions are handled similarly.
6043
6044 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
6045 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
6046 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
6047 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6048 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
6049
6050 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
6051 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
6052 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
6053 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
6054 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
6055
6056 @smallexample
6057 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
6058 @end smallexample
6059
6060 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
6061 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
6062 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
6063 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
6064 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
6065
6066 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
6067 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
6068 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
6069 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
6070 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
6071 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
6072
6073 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
6074 macro properly.
6075
6076 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
6077 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
6078 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
6079 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
6080 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
6081 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
6082
6083 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
6084 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
6085 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
6086 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
6087 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
6088 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
6089 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
6090 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
6091 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
6092 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
6093 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
6094 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
6095 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
6096 the initialization process.
6097
6098 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
6099 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
6100 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
6101 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
6102 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
6103 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
6104 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
6105 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
6106 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
6107 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
6108 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
6109
6110 @ifinfo
6111 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
6112 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
6113 @end ifinfo
6114
6115 @node Macros for Initialization
6116 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
6117
6118 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
6119 and termination functions:
6120
6121 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6122 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6123 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6124 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6125 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6126 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6127 run the initialization functions.
6128 @end defmac
6129
6130 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6131 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6132 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6133 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6134 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6135 @end defmac
6136
6137 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6138 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6139 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6140 @end defmac
6141
6142 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6143 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6144 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6145 @end defmac
6146
6147 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6148 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6149 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6150 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6151 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6152 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6153
6154 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6155 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6156 exception tables embedded in the code.
6157 @end defmac
6158
6159 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6160 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6161 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6162 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6163 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6164 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6165 @end defmac
6166
6167 @defmac INVOKE__main
6168 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6169 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6170 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6171 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6172 @end defmac
6173
6174 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6175 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6176 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6177 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6178 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6179 @end defmac
6180
6181 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6182
6183 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6184
6185 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6186
6187 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6188 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6189
6190 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6191 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6192 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6193
6194 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6195 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6196
6197 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6198 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6199 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6200 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6201
6202 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6203 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6204 @end defmac
6205
6206 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6207 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6208 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6209 @command{nm}.
6210 @end defmac
6211
6212 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6213 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6214 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6215 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6216 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6217 produces.
6218 @end defmac
6219
6220 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6221 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6222 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6223 termination functions in shared libraries:
6224
6225 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6226 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6227 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6228 @end defmac
6229
6230 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6231 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6232 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6233 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6234 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6235 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6236 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6237 @end defmac
6238
6239 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6240 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6241 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6242 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6243 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6244 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6245 @end defmac
6246
6247 @node Instruction Output
6248 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6249
6250 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6251 This describes assembler instruction output.
6252
6253 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6254 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6255 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6256 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6257 @end defmac
6258
6259 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6260 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6261 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6262 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6263 to registers using alternate names.
6264 @end defmac
6265
6266 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6267 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6268 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6269 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6270 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6271 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6272 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6273 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6274
6275 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6276 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6277 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6278 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6279 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6280 @end defmac
6281
6282 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6283 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6284 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6285
6286 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6287 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6288 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6289 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6290 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6291 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6292 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6293 so that it will not be output twice.
6294
6295 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6296 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6297 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6298 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6299 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6300
6301 @findex recog_data.operand
6302 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6303 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6304
6305 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6306 in the usual way.
6307 @end defmac
6308
6309 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6310 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6311 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6312 they will be output differently.
6313
6314 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6315 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6316 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6317 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6318 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6319 by changing the contents of the vector.
6320
6321 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6322 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6323 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6324 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6325 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6326 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6327
6328 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6329 @end defmac
6330
6331 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6332
6333 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6334 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6335 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6336 RTL expression.
6337
6338 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6339 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6340 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6341 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6342 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6343 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6344 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6345
6346 @findex reg_names
6347 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6348 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6349 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6350 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6351
6352 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6353 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6354 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6355 @var{code}.
6356 @end defmac
6357
6358 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6359 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6360 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6361 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6362 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6363 in this way.
6364 @end defmac
6365
6366 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6367 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6368 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6369 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6370
6371 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6372 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6373 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6374 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6375 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6376 Format}.
6377 @end defmac
6378
6379 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6380 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6381 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6382 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6383 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6384 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6385 or whatever.
6386
6387 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6388 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6389 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6390 @end defmac
6391
6392 @findex final_sequence
6393 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6394 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6395 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6396 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6397 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6398 being output.
6399
6400 @findex asm_fprintf
6401 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6402 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6403 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6404 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6405 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6406 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6407 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6408 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6409 files can define these macros differently.
6410 @end defmac
6411
6412 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6413 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6414 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6415 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6416 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6417 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6418 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6419 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6420 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6421 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6422 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6423 @end defmac
6424
6425 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6426 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6427 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6428 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6429 first variant.
6430
6431 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6432 @smallexample
6433 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6434 @end smallexample
6435 @noindent
6436 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6437 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6438 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6439 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6440 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6441 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6442 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6443 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6444 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6445
6446 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6447 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6448 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6449
6450 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6451 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6452 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6453 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6454 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6455 opcodes or operand order.
6456 @end defmac
6457
6458 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6459 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6460 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6461 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6462 profiling.
6463 @end defmac
6464
6465 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6466 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6467 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6468 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6469 profiling.
6470 @end defmac
6471
6472 @node Dispatch Tables
6473 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6474
6475 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6476 This concerns dispatch tables.
6477
6478 @cindex dispatch table
6479 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6480 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6481 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6482 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6483 definitions of these labels are output using
6484 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6485 way here. For example,
6486
6487 @smallexample
6488 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6489 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6490 @end smallexample
6491
6492 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6493 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6494 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6495 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6496 mode and flags can be read.
6497 @end defmac
6498
6499 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6500 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6501 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6502
6503 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6504 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6505 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6506 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6507 For example,
6508
6509 @smallexample
6510 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6511 @end smallexample
6512 @end defmac
6513
6514 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6515 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6516 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6517 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6518 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6519 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6520
6521 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6522 for the table.
6523
6524 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6525 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6526 @end defmac
6527
6528 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6529 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6530 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6531 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6532 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6533 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6534 of the preceding label.
6535
6536 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6537 the jump-table.
6538 @end defmac
6539
6540 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6541
6542 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6543
6544 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6545
6546 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6547
6548 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6549
6550 @node Exception Region Output
6551 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6552
6553 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6554
6555 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6556 region.
6557
6558 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6559 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6560 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6561 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6562 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6563
6564 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6565 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6566 @end defmac
6567
6568 @defmac EH_FRAME_THROUGH_COLLECT2
6569 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will identified by
6570 specially named labels. The collect2 process will locate these
6571 labels and generate code to register the frames.
6572
6573 This might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker will not
6574 place the eh_frames in-between the sentinals from @file{crtstuff.c},
6575 or if the system linker does garbage collection and sections cannot
6576 be marked as not to be collected.
6577 @end defmac
6578
6579 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6580 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6581 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6582 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6583 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6584 @end defmac
6585
6586 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6587 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6588 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6589 @end defmac
6590
6591 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6592 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6593 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6594 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6595 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6596 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6597 @end defmac
6598
6599 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6600 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6601 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6602 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6603 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6604 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6605 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6606
6607 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6608 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6609 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6610
6611 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6612 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6613 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6614 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6615 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6616 depending on this setting.
6617
6618 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6619 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6620 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6621 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6622 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6623 @end deftypefn
6624
6625 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6626 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6627 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6628 command-line option processing.
6629 @end deftypevr
6630
6631 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6632 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6633 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6634 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6635 @end defmac
6636
6637 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6638 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6639 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6640 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6641 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6642 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6643 @end defmac
6644
6645 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6646 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6647 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6648 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6649 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is true, and the positive
6650 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6651 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6652 @end defmac
6653
6654 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6655
6656 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6657
6658 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6659
6660 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6661
6662 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6663
6664 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6665
6666 @node Alignment Output
6667 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6668
6669 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6670 This describes commands for alignment.
6671
6672 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6673 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6674 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6675
6676 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6677 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6678 define the macro.
6679
6680 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6681 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6682 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6683 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6684 @end defmac
6685
6686 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6687
6688 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6689 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6690 a @code{BARRIER}.
6691
6692 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6693 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6694 define the macro.
6695 @end defmac
6696
6697 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6698
6699 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6700 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6701 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6702
6703 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6704 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6705 define the macro.
6706
6707 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6708 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6709 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6710 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6711 @end defmac
6712
6713 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6714
6715 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6716 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6717 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6718 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6719
6720 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6721 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6722 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6723 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6724 @end defmac
6725
6726 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6727
6728 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6729 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6730 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6731 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6732 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6733 @end defmac
6734
6735 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6736 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6737 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6738 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6739 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6740 section.
6741 @end defmac
6742
6743 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6744 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6745 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6746 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6747 @end defmac
6748
6749 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6750 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6751 for padding, if necessary.
6752 @end defmac
6753
6754 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6755 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6756 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6757 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6758 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6759 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6760 @end defmac
6761
6762 @need 3000
6763 @node Debugging Info
6764 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6765
6766 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6767 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6768
6769 @menu
6770 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6771 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6772 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6773 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6774 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6775 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6776 @end menu
6777
6778 @node All Debuggers
6779 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6780
6781 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6782 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6783
6784 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6785 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6786 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6787 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6788 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6789 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6790 compiler and another for DBX@.
6791
6792 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6793 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6794 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6795 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6796 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6797
6798 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6799 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6800 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6801 @end defmac
6802
6803 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6804 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6805 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6806 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6807 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6808 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6809 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6810 @option{-g} options is used.
6811 @end defmac
6812
6813 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6814 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6815 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6816 @var{offset}.
6817 @end defmac
6818
6819 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6820 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6821 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6822 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6823 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6824 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6825 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6826
6827 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6828 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6829 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6830 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6831 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6832
6833 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6834 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6835 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6836 @end defmac
6837
6838 @node DBX Options
6839 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6840
6841 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6842 These are specific options for DBX output.
6843
6844 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6845 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6846 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6847 @end defmac
6848
6849 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6850 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6851 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6852 @end defmac
6853
6854 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6855 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6856 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6857 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6858 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6859 if there is any occasion to.
6860 @end defmac
6861
6862 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6863 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6864 in the text section.
6865 @end defmac
6866
6867 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6868 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6869 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6870 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6871 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6872 @end defmac
6873
6874 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6875 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6876 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6877 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6878 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6879 information format.
6880 @end defmac
6881
6882 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6883 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6884 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6885 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6886 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6887 @end defmac
6888
6889 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6890 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6891 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6892 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6893 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6894 @end defmac
6895
6896 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6897 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6898 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6899 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6900 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6901 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6902 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6903 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6904 @end defmac
6905
6906 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6907 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6908 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6909 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6910 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6911 if backslash is correct for your system.
6912 @end defmac
6913
6914 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6915 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6916 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6917 variable.
6918 @end defmac
6919
6920 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6921 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6922 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6923 @end defmac
6924
6925 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6926 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6927 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6928 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6929 @end defmac
6930
6931 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6932 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6933 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6934 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6935 @end defmac
6936
6937 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6938 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6939 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6940 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6941 @end defmac
6942
6943 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6944 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6945 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6946 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6947 code.
6948 @end defmac
6949
6950 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6951 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6952 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6953 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6954 an absolute address.
6955 @end defmac
6956
6957 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6958 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6959 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6960 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6961 @end defmac
6962
6963 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6964 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6965 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6966 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6967 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6968 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6969 number for a type number.
6970 @end defmac
6971
6972 @node DBX Hooks
6973 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6974
6975 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6976 These are hooks for DBX format.
6977
6978 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6979 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6980 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6981 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6982 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6983 unique labels in the assembly output.
6984
6985 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6986 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6987 @end defmac
6988
6989 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6990 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6991 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6992 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6993 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6994 @end defmac
6995
6996 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6997 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6998 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6999 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
7000 @end defmac
7001
7002 @node File Names and DBX
7003 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
7004
7005 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7006 This describes file names in DBX format.
7007
7008 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7009 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
7010 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
7011 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
7012 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
7013
7014 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
7015 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
7016
7017 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
7018 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
7019 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
7020 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
7021 @end defmac
7022
7023 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
7024 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
7025 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
7026 the beginning of the file.
7027 @end defmac
7028
7029 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
7030 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
7031 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
7032 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
7033 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
7034 @end defmac
7035
7036 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
7037 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
7038 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
7039 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
7040
7041 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
7042 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
7043 @end defmac
7044
7045 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
7046 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
7047 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
7048 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
7049 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
7050 @end defmac
7051
7052 @need 2000
7053 @node SDB and DWARF
7054 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
7055
7056 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7057 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
7058
7059 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
7060 Define this macro to 1 if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
7061 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
7062 @end defmac
7063
7064 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
7065 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
7066 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
7067
7068 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
7069
7070 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
7071 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
7072 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
7073 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
7074 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
7075 @end defmac
7076
7077 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
7078 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
7079 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
7080 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
7081 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
7082 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
7083 @end defmac
7084
7085 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
7086
7087 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
7088 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
7089 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
7090 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
7091 @end defmac
7092
7093 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
7094
7095 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
7096
7097 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
7098
7099 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
7100
7101 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7102 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7103 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7104 @end defmac
7105
7106 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
7107 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
7108 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
7109 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
7110 @end defmac
7111
7112 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{offset}, @var{section})
7113 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
7114 section-relative reference to the given @var{label} plus @var{offset}, using
7115 an integer of the given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the
7116 given @var{section}.
7117 @end defmac
7118
7119 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7120 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7121 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7122 @end defmac
7123
7124 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DATAREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
7125 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to the
7126 given @var{label} relative to the dbase, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7127 @end defmac
7128
7129 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7130 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7131 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7132 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7133 is referenced by a function.
7134 @end defmac
7135
7136 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7137
7138 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7139 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7140 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7141 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7142 not define them yourself.
7143 @end defmac
7144
7145 @defmac SDB_DELIM
7146 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7147 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7148 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7149 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7150 required.
7151 @end defmac
7152
7153 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7154 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7155 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7156 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7157 it.
7158 @end defmac
7159
7160 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7161 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7162 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7163 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7164 @end defmac
7165
7166 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7167 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7168 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7169 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7170 @end defmac
7171
7172 @need 2000
7173 @node VMS Debug
7174 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7175
7176 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7177 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7178
7179 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7180 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7181 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7182 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7183 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7184 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7185 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7186 @end defmac
7187
7188 @node Floating Point
7189 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7190 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7191 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7192
7193 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7194 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7195 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7196 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7197 doing the compilation.
7198
7199 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7200 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7201 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7202 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7203 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7204 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7205 target floating point formats are identical.
7206
7207 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7208 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7209 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7210 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7211
7212 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7213 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7214 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7215 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7216 quantity.
7217 @end defmac
7218
7219 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7220 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7221 @end deftypefn
7222
7223 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7224 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7225 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7226 @end deftypefn
7227
7228 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7229 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7230 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7231 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7232 defined by the C language for both.
7233 @end deftypefn
7234
7235 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7236 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7237 @end deftypefn
7238
7239 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7240 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7241 @end deftypefn
7242
7243 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7244 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7245 @end deftypefn
7246
7247 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7248 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7249 @end deftypefn
7250
7251 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7252 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7253 @end deftypefn
7254
7255 @node Mode Switching
7256 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7257 @cindex mode switching
7258 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7259
7260 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7261 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7262 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7263
7264 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7265 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7266 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7267 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7268 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7269 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7270 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7271
7272 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7273 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7274 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7275 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7276 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7277 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7278 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7279 are optional.
7280 @end defmac
7281
7282 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7283 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7284 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7285 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7286 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7287 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7288 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7289 entity in question.
7290 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7291 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7292 switch is needed / supplied.
7293 @end defmac
7294
7295 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7296
7297 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7298
7299 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7300
7301 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7302
7303 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7304
7305 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7306
7307 @node Target Attributes
7308 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7309 @cindex target attributes
7310 @cindex machine attributes
7311 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7312
7313 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7314 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7315 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7316
7317 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7318
7319 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7320
7321 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7322
7323 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7324
7325 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7326
7327 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7328
7329 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7330
7331 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7332 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7333 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7334 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7335 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7336 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7337 on this implementation detail.
7338 @end defmac
7339
7340 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7341
7342 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7343
7344 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7345
7346 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7347
7348 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7349
7350 @hook TARGET_OPTION_POST_STREAM_IN
7351
7352 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7353
7354 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7355
7356 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7357
7358 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7359
7360 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7361
7362 @hook TARGET_RELAYOUT_FUNCTION
7363
7364 @node Emulated TLS
7365 @section Emulating TLS
7366 @cindex Emulated TLS
7367
7368 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7369 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7370 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7371 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7372 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7373 layer.
7374
7375 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7376 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7377 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7378 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7379
7380 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7381
7382 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7383
7384 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7385
7386 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7387
7388 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7389
7390 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7391
7392 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7393
7394 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7395
7396 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7397
7398 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7399
7400 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7401 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7402 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7403
7404 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7405 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7406 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7407 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7408
7409 @smallexample
7410 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7411 unsigned int d;
7412
7413 d = cp0count + 3;
7414 @end smallexample
7415
7416 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7417 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7418 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7419
7420 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7421 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7422 later in the function.
7423
7424 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7425 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7426 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7427
7428 @node PCH Target
7429 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7430 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7431
7432 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7433
7434 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7435
7436 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7437
7438 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7439
7440 @node C++ ABI
7441 @section C++ ABI parameters
7442 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7443
7444 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7445
7446 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7447
7448 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7449
7450 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7451
7452 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7453
7454 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7455
7456 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7457
7458 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7459
7460 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7461
7462 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7463
7464 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7465
7466 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7467
7468 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7469
7470 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7471
7472 @node Named Address Spaces
7473 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7474 @cindex named address spaces
7475
7476 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7477 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7478 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7479 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7480 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7481 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7482 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7483 @code{const} type attributes.
7484
7485 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7486 pointers to the generic address space.
7487
7488 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7489 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7490 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7491 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7492 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7493 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7494 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7495 always 32 bits).
7496
7497 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7498 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7499 address space.
7500
7501 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7502 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7503 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7504 named address space #1:
7505 @smallexample
7506 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7507 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7508 @end smallexample
7509
7510 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7511
7512 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7513
7514 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7515
7516 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7517
7518 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7519
7520 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7521
7522 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ZERO_ADDRESS_VALID
7523
7524 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7525
7526 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DEBUG
7527
7528 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_DIAGNOSE_USAGE
7529
7530 @node Misc
7531 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7532 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7533
7534 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7535 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7536
7537 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7538 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7539 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7540 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7541 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7542 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7543 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7544 @end defmac
7545
7546 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7547 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7548 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7549 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7550 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7551 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7552 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7553 @end defmac
7554
7555 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7556 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7557 elements of a jump-table should have.
7558 @end defmac
7559
7560 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7561 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7562 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7563 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7564 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7565 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7566 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7567 flags can be updated.
7568 @end defmac
7569
7570 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7571 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7572 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7573 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7574 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7575 is in effect.
7576 @end defmac
7577
7578 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7579
7580 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7581 Define this macro to 1 if operations between registers with integral mode
7582 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7583 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7584 @end defmac
7585
7586 @hook TARGET_MIN_ARITHMETIC_PRECISION
7587
7588 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7589 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7590 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7591 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7592 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7593 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7594 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7595 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7596
7597 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7598 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7599 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7600 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7601 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7602
7603 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7604 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7605 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7606 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7607 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7608
7609 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7610 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7611 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7612 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7613 @end defmac
7614
7615 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7616 Define this macro to 1 if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7617 extends.
7618 @end defmac
7619
7620 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7621
7622 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7623 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7624 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7625 @end defmac
7626
7627 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7628 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7629 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7630 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7631 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7632 at run-time.
7633 @end defmac
7634
7635 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7636 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7637 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7638 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7639 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7640 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7641 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7642 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7643 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7644 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7645 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7646
7647 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7648 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7649 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7650
7651 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7652 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7653 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7654 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7655 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7656
7657 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7658 @end defmac
7659
7660 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7661 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7662
7663 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7664 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7665 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7666 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7667 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7668
7669 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7670
7671 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7672 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7673 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7674 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7675 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7676 such cases may improve things.
7677 @end defmac
7678
7679 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7680
7681 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7682 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7683 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7684 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7685 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7686 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7687
7688 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7689 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7690 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7691 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7692 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7693 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7694 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7695 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7696 the compiler.
7697
7698 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7699 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7700 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7701 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7702 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7703 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7704 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7705 expression
7706
7707 @smallexample
7708 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7709 @end smallexample
7710
7711 @noindent
7712 can be converted to
7713
7714 @smallexample
7715 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7716 @end smallexample
7717
7718 @noindent
7719 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7720 tested into the sign bit.
7721
7722 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7723 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7724 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7725 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7726 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7727 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7728
7729 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7730 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7731 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7732 to be used:
7733
7734 @itemize @bullet
7735 @item
7736 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7737 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7738 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7739 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7740 combine the normalization with other operations.
7741
7742 @item
7743 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7744 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7745 other machines.
7746
7747 @item
7748 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7749 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7750 others.
7751
7752 @item
7753 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7754 @end itemize
7755
7756 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7757 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7758 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7759 those cases, e.g., one matching
7760
7761 @smallexample
7762 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7763 @end smallexample
7764
7765 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7766 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7767 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7768 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7769 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7770 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7771 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7772 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7773
7774 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7775 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7776 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7777 @end defmac
7778
7779 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7780 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7781 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7782 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7783 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7784 this macro.
7785 @end defmac
7786
7787 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7788 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7789 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7790 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7791 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7792 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7793 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7794 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7795 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7796 given mode.
7797 @end defmac
7798
7799 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7800 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7801 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7802 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7803 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7804 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7805 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7806 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7807 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7808 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7809 this value.
7810
7811 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7812 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7813
7814 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7815 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7816 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7817 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7818
7819 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7820 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7821 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7822 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7823 breaking the API@.
7824 @end defmac
7825
7826 @defmac Pmode
7827 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7828 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7829 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7830 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7831 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7832
7833 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7834 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7835 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7836 to @code{Pmode}.
7837 @end defmac
7838
7839 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7840 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7841 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7842 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7843 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7844 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7845 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7846 @end defmac
7847
7848 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7849 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7850 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7851 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7852 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7853 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7854
7855 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7856 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7857 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7858 @end defmac
7859
7860 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7861
7862 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7863
7864 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7865 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7866 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7867 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7868 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7869 @end defmac
7870
7871 @findex #pragma
7872 @findex pragma
7873 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7874 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7875 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7876 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7877 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7878 setup required for the pragmas.
7879
7880 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7881 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7882 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7883
7884 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7885 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7886
7887 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7888 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7889 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7890 @end defmac
7891
7892 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7893 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7894
7895 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7896 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7897 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7898 pragma of the form
7899
7900 @smallexample
7901 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7902 @end smallexample
7903
7904 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7905 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7906 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7907 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7908 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7909 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7910 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7911 arguments of pragmas registered with
7912 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7913 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7914
7915 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7916 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7917 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7918 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7919 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7920 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7921 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7922 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7923 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7924 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7925 how to build this object file.
7926 @end deftypefun
7927
7928 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7929 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7930 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7931 @end defmac
7932
7933 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7934 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7935 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7936 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7937 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7938 @end defmac
7939
7940 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7941 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7942 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7943 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7944 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7945 @end defmac
7946
7947 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7948 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7949 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7950 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7951 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7952 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7953 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7954 you should define this macro.
7955
7956 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7957 @end defmac
7958
7959 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7960 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7961 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7962 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7963 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7964 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7965 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7966 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7967 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7968 slot of @var{insn}.
7969
7970 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7971 @end defmac
7972
7973 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7974 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7975 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7976 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7977 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7978 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7979
7980 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7981 @end defmac
7982
7983 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_ADJUST
7984
7985 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7986 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7987 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7988 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7989 separate math library.
7990
7991 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7992 @end defmac
7993
7994 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7995 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7996 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7997
7998 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7999 is wrong.
8000 @end defmac
8001
8002 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
8003 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
8004 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
8005 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
8006 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
8007 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
8008 for cross-profiling.
8009 @end defmac
8010
8011 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
8012
8013 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
8014 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
8015 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
8016 1 if it does use cc0.
8017 @end defmac
8018
8019 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
8020 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
8021 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
8022 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
8023 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
8024 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
8025 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
8026 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
8027 @end defmac
8028
8029 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
8030 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
8031 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
8032 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
8033 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
8034 @end defmac
8035
8036 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
8037 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
8038 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
8039 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
8040 about the currently processed blocks.
8041 @end defmac
8042
8043 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
8044 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
8045 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
8046 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8047 to by @var{ce_info}.
8048 @end defmac
8049
8050 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
8051 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
8052 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
8053 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8054 to by @var{ce_info}.
8055 @end defmac
8056
8057 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
8058 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
8059 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
8060 to by @var{ce_info}.
8061 @end defmac
8062
8063 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
8064
8065 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
8066
8067 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
8068
8069 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
8070
8071 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
8072 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
8073 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
8074 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
8075 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
8076
8077 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
8078
8079 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
8080
8081 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
8082
8083 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
8084
8085 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
8086
8087 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
8088
8089 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
8090
8091 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
8092
8093 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
8094
8095 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
8096
8097 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
8098
8099 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
8100
8101 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
8102
8103 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
8104
8105 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
8106 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
8107 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
8108 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
8109 @end defmac
8110
8111 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
8112 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8113 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8114 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8115 executable files.
8116 @end defmac
8117
8118 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8119 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8120 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8121 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8122 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8123 lists.
8124 @end defmac
8125
8126 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8127 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8128 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8129 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8130 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8131 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8132 defined as this expression:
8133
8134 @smallexample
8135 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8136 build_tree_list
8137 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8138 NULL))
8139 @end smallexample
8140 @end defmac
8141
8142 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8143
8144 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8145
8146 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8147
8148 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8149
8150 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
8151
8152 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
8153
8154 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8155
8156 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8157 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8158 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8159 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8160 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8161 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8162 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8163 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8164 @end defmac
8165
8166 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8167 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8168 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8169 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8170 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8171 @end deftypefn
8172
8173 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8174 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8175 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8176 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8177 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8178 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8179 @end deftypefn
8180
8181 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8182 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8183 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8184 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8185 that are different from @option{-I}.
8186 @end deftypefn
8187
8188 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8189 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8190 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8191 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8192 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8193 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8194 @end defmac
8195
8196 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8197 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8198 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8199 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8200 @end defmac
8201
8202 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8203 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8204 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8205 @end defmac
8206
8207 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8208 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8209 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8210 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8211 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8212 @end defmac
8213
8214 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8215 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8216 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8217 @end defmac
8218
8219 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8220 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8221 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8222 and scanf formatter settings.
8223 @end defmac
8224
8225 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8226
8227 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8228
8229 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8230
8231 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8232
8233 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8234
8235 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8236
8237 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8238 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8239 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8240 @end defmac
8241
8242 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8243 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8244 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8245 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8246 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8247 @end defmac
8248
8249 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8250
8251 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8252
8253 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8254
8255 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8256
8257 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8258
8259 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8260
8261 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8262
8263 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8264
8265 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8266
8267 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8268
8269 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8270
8271 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8272
8273 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8274
8275 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8276 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8277 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8278 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8279 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8280 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8281 representation.
8282
8283 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8284 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8285 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8286 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8287 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8288
8289 @itemize @bullet
8290 @item
8291 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8292 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8293 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8294
8295 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8296 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8297 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8298 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8299 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8300 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8301 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8302 not really a large change.
8303
8304 @item
8305 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8306 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8307 port in this code.
8308
8309 @item
8310 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8311 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8312 @end itemize
8313
8314 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8315 maintainer is familiar with.
8316
8317 @end defmac
8318
8319 @hook TARGET_RUN_TARGET_SELFTESTS